Canon | EOS 6D | User manual | Canon EOS 6D User manual

Canon EOS 6D User manual
‫)‪EOS 6D (WG‬‬
‫)‪EOS 6D (N‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ )‪ EOS 6D (N‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻲ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ )‪ EOS 6D (WG/N‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺘﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﺫﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٢٣٫٩ × ٣٥٫٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٠٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،DIGIC 5+‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺫﻱ ‪ ١١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ )‪ ،(Full HD‬ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ *Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.*(GPS‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ EOS 6D (N‬ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.(GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ "ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ" )ﺹ ‪(٣٨٣ ،٣٨٢‬‬
‫ﻭ"ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ" )ﺹ ‪ً (١٧ ،١٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SD‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDXC‬‬
‫* ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ UHS-I‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺹ ‪(٢١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪IPB‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫‪-I) ALL-I‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪.SDXC‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪LP-E6‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺍﻗﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-EOS6D‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LC-E6/LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LC-E6‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .LC-E6E‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ LC-E6E‬ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺩ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣُﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺭﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(PDF‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪/(GPS‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬
‫‪/Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪*GPS‬‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.EOS 6D (N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪:PDF‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ(‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٨٨‬ﻭ‪.٣٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )‪(EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٣٩٤-٣٩٢‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪<6‬‬
‫>‪<5‬‬
‫>‪<U> <V> <9‬‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻭ‪ 9‬ﻭ‪ 7‬ﻭ‪8‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻘﺎء‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺻﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫)ﺹ **( ‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( )ﺹ ‪.(٤٧ ،٣٤‬‬
‫ﻳُﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٫٤‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (DSLR‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪ /‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫‪٢٣٥‬‬
‫‪٢٧١‬‬
‫‪٢٧٩‬‬
‫‪٢٨٥‬‬
‫‪٣٠١‬‬
‫‪٣٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٨٧‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪٣ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٦ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪٧ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪١٤ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٦ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٨ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪٢٠ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٣٠ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪٣١ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٣٤ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪٣٦ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪٣٨ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ‪٣٩ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪٤٢ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪٤٣ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٤٩ ...........................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٥١ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ‪٥٣ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٥٣ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٥٥ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٥٥ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٥٦ ........................................................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪٥٦ ........................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪٦٠ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٦٣ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ( ‪٦٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ( ‪٦٩ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪٧١ ....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ‪٧٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪٧٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪٧٦ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪٧٧ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪٧٨ ....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ( ‪٧٩ ..............................‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ( ‪٨٠ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪ G‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪٨١ .........................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪٨٣ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ‪٨٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪٨٧ ........................................................‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪٩٢ .....................................................(AF‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪٩٤ ........................................................ (AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٩٦ ...................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪٩٧ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٩٨ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪١٠٠.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٠٢.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪١٠٦......................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١١٢.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١١٥.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١١٨........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪١٢٠.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪١٢١..........................................................‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪١٢٢.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪١٢٣......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪١٢٥................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪١٢٦.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪١٣٠................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪١٣١...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪١٣٤.................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٣٦...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪١٣٨.......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪١٤٠................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪١٤٢.............................................................. (AE‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪١٤٤.........................................................‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٤٦..................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪١٤٧..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪١٤٨...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٤٩............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٥١......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪١٥٢.......................................................(AEB‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪١٥٣.................................................................. (AE‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪١٥٤.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪١٥٥................................‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪١٥٨.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٦٥.....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪١٦٦.......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٦٧..................................................................‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٦٧........................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٧٠.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٧٢........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٨٠............................................................. LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٨٥..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪١٨٧.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪١٩٢..........‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١٩٩...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٢٠٤................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٢١٥..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪٢١٦............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪٢١٨...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٢٢٠...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٢٢٣..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٢٢٥..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٣٥‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٣٦.................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٣٨..............................................................‬‬
‫‪ He‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٤٢...............................................................‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪٢٤٤.................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٤٦..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢٤٧....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪٢٤٩........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٢٥١.............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٢٥٣..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪٢٥٥.........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٢٥٧.................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪٢٦١.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٦٥..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٦٧....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٦٩.....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٦٩...................................................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٧٠.................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٧١‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٧٢........................................‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪٢٧٧....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪٢٧٩‬‬
‫‪f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪٢٨٠..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪٢٨١..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪٢٨٣.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٢٨٦...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٨٨........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٩٣....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪٢٩٥...................................................(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪٢٩٨.................................................‬‬
‫‪ p‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٩٩...................................................‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٣٠١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٣٠٢.........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٣٠٣................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٣٠٤......................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :C.Fn I‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٣٠٤........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn II‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪٣٠٧...................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn III‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪٣١١.............................................................‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪٣١٤........................................................‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣٢٠..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪٣٢٧.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٣٢٨.........................................................‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪٣٣١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪٣٣٢.............................................................................. B‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٣٣٤...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪٣٣٨..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪٣٣٩.......................................................................... Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٣٤٢.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٣٤٦......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪٣٥٤........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪٣٥٦................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ‪٣٧٠......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٣٧١..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٣٨٢...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٣٨٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٣٨٨...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪٣٩٠.......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٣٩٢........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٣٩٤.......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٣٩٥..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٣٩٦..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺹ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺹ‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣١٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٣٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺹ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺹ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺹ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺹ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺹ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺹ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺹ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺹ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺹ‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺹ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﺹ‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺹ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺹ‪١٥٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٠٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺹ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٣٨‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٤٢‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٤٣‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٤٤‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٤٧‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٥٣‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٥٧‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٦١‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٦٥‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٦٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٧٢‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٧٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٨٦‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٩٥‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٧٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٩٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺹ‪١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪(C.Fn‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٠٣‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٢٠‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٢٧‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٣٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢١٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢١٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٨٠‬‬
‫ﺹ‪٢٨١‬‬
‫‪*Wi-Fi/GPS‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ EOS 6D (N‬ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.(GPS‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺼﺮﺍ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻣﺸﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻻ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴًﺎ ﻗﻮﻳًﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺿﺨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﻩ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻀﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﺨﺘﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﺗﻴﺔ ﻛﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٪٩٩,٩٩‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ٪٠,٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮّﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻳﻪ ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻻ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴًﺎ ﻗﻮﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٨‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <f‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪) <x‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ" )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٦٧‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(٢٢‬‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫>‪ <f‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫>‪ <i‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫>‪ <q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(٤٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺹ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺹ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٢١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٣٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺑﻮﺱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺹ ‪ ١٦٥‬ﻭ‪(٢٨٣‬‬
‫>‪ <C/q‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ٢٨٦ / ٢٦٤‬ﻭ‪(٣٩٠‬‬
‫>‪ <F‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) (N3‬ﺹ ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫>‪ <Y‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٢١٩‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦١‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ ٤٤‬ﻭ‪ ١٨١‬ﻭ‪(٢١١‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ >‪<V‬‬
‫>‪ <k/A‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠٣/١٧٩‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ‪) Start/Stop‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )ﺹ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﻭ‪(٢٠٤‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠/١٥٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٤٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫>‪<M‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪،١٨٢ ،٦٤ ،٦٠ ،٤٨‬‬
‫‪(٣٣٢ ،٢٣٦ ،٢١٠‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪ ٥١‬ﻭ‪(٢٦٩‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢٤٤/٢٤٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣٦‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺹ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫>‪ <h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪4L‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫>‪<l/k‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫>‪<w‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪) (HDR‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٥‬‬
‫>‪ <r‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪(GPS‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٥١‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪(SEL AF ،SEL [ ] ،[ -- -- -- ] AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card Full‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card Err‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٦‬‬
‫>‪ <P‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )‪(L‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(CLn‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣١٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٠‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫>‪ <h‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٥١‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪(SEL AF ،SEL [ ] ،[ -- -- -- ] AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ (Card‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ (Card‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫>‪ <z‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪/ (١٥٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٢‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧٠‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪/ (١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٦‬‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٥‬‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪ (١٤٤‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )‪(L‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫‪ : s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٤‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫‪ : a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ : F‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫‪ : C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫‪ : 8‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ )ﺹ ‪(٧٤‬‬
‫‪ : 2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫‪ : 3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫‪ : 4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫‪ : 5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٨‬‬
‫‪ : 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٩‬‬
‫‪ : F‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ )ﺹ ‪(٨٠‬‬
‫‪ : G‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪) (HDR‬ﺹ ‪(٨١‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪/s/d‬‬
‫‪ ،(F/a/f‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ x‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٢٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪4L‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺹ ‪(٤١‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫‪ φ‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٧٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ ٩٧‬ﻭ‪(١٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭﻩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٦‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭّﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪٪٤٩ - ٠‬‬
‫‪٪٧٤ - ٥٠‬‬
‫‪ ٪٧٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺪﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫< ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ >‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺌﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﻭﻗﺼﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٣٤‬ﻭﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٣٥‬ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٪٩٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪.LP-E6‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )ﺹ ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .SDXC‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ UHS-I Speed Class‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ً SDXC‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z1: Release shutter without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٤٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،(...‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ٍ [Recording...‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٠٠٠١‬ﺹ ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٣‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٦‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺎ(‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ >‪.<f‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ >‪ <2>/<1‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪[52: Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Recording...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ )‪ (b‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )‪١٠ - ١٩ ٢٠ - ٤٩ ٥٠ - ٦٩ ٧٠ - ١٠٠ (٪‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫‪١-٩‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫]ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫‪١٠٩٠‬‬
‫‪٩٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪BG-E13‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ :LP-E6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ٤٨٠ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ]‪) [54: Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E13‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺫﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪) .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.([m/x‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Date/Time/‬‬
‫‪) [Zone‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪.[52‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Date/‬‬
‫‪) [Time/Zone‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [London‬ﻟﻨﺪﻥ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.(<s‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٥٢-٥١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )‪.(UTC‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.(<s‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Y‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Y‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Language K‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪.[52‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [LanguageK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ .EF‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ EF-S‬ﻭ‪.EF-M‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Autofocus‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻬﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ ،(IS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 4L‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Image Stabilizer‬ﺃﻱ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ "ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ"‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<2‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪،<1‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪١٠٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 4L‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺻﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ١٠) E‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧٩‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.(0) LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ >‪<f> <R‬‬
‫>‪ ،<i‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ )‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ >‪<f> <R‬‬
‫>‪ ،<i‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ )‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ >‪ <9‬ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫>‪ .<U> <V‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn III -3: Multi function lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( )ﺹ ‪(٣١٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <L‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٨‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ U‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪/(9‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<U‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪.(7‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U> <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٣‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ*‪) ١‬ﺹ ‪(١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ*‪) ١‬ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪٢*Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ*‪) ١‬ﺹ ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺹ ‪(١٥٢ ،١٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫< )ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‬
‫< )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺹ ‪ (٣٢٠‬ﺃﻭ >‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٩٤‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ <U> <V‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫>‪<U> <V‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪8‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪) My Menu 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[z4‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪) .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٤٦‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format card‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Format card‬‬
‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﻹﻟﺤﺎﻕ ]‪) [Low level format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ( ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ ،<X‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Format card‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٧٧‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .FAT‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪١٢٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ .exFAT‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.exFAT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.Microsoft‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Image review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Image review‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٨‬ﻟﺘﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LCD off/on btn‬‬
‫)ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،(LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Remains on‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪،‬‬
‫]‪) [Shutter btn.‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫)‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪) q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) u‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪١٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪٢٥٦٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪١٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪١٢٨٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪) Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪2x‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪6‬‬
‫‪ ١٠) e‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪zD‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪z‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٢:٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪/١٩٢٠x١٠٨٠‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(IPB‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪[53: z button display options‬‬
‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.°١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪ .(٢١٠ ،١٨٢‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.III‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪C.Fn III:‬‬
‫‪) [Operation/Others‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪C.Fn III -5 [Custom Controls‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [5: Custom Controls‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪.[e‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪[e: DOF preview button‬‬
‫)ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪.[Q‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪[Q: VF electronic level‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ °٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ °٩±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ °١‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ °٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [VF electronic level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Feature guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[53‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Feature‬‬
‫‪) [guide‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [zHelp‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<B‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪) [z4: Long exposure noise reduction] :‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪) [8C.Fn I -1: Exposure level increments] :‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪) [8C.Fn II -1: Tracking sensitivity] :‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ً .(٣٤٢ ،٨٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤ ﻨ ﻄ‬
‫ﻘﺔ ﺍ‬
‫ﻷ‬
‫ﺳﺎ‬
‫ﺳ ﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘًﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛًﺎ‪) ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٦٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <A‬ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ >‪ <D‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺹ ‪ .(٤٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.(<o‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ .(<o‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻣﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪) Canon‬ﺹ ‪) (١٧٠‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<G‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫‪) EX‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ >‪.(<5‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪) .‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪ .‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ > < ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<C‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<A‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ CA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Creative Auto‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<C‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(7) .<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٧٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﻤ ّﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٤‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٧٥‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<U‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<5‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﻋﻦ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﻣﻦ >‪.<i‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪:‬‬
‫> < ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ٍ ١٠ :‬‬
‫< ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪:‬‬
‫>‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<8‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(7) .<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<8‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯًﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺭﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﻞء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ >‪) <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪٤٫٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<4‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺮﻳﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫>‪ ٠٫٢٥) <40.25m/0.8ft‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٠٫٨/‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫>‪) <V‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﺍﻛﻀﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻃﻔﻼ‬
‫>‪) <5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ >‪) <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ >‪ <A‬ﻭ>‪.<F‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Quick‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ >‪) <F‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺛﺒﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺄﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪ G‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <G‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ .((HDR‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺛﺒﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ High Dynamic Range‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟـ >‪) <F‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻚ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ )ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺗﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑًﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪) <G‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪((HDR‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (HDR‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ >‪) <F‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ( ﻭ>‪) <G‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪((HDR‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ .RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪،RAW‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ً .73‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺎﺫﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "buSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <F‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<G‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(7) .<Q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪) .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ :k‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪C A‬‬
‫‪ :u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ :M‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ )ﺹ ‪(٨٤‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<2‬ﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ >‪ <A‬ﻭ>‪ ،<G‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺍ ٍﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪F 6 5 4 3 2‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <C‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<8‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ /‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ /‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ /‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ ‪ /‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ >‪ ،<8‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ ،<2> :‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<3‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<4‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ ،<5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<F‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(7) <Q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪Standard setting‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ]‪[Ambience-based shots‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Effect‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<2‬ﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪Standard setting‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [52: LCD brightness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<Q‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Ambience-based shots‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ( ﻭ]‪) [Effects‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <2‬ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <3‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺯﺍ ٍﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪Standard setting‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ ﻭﺃﻧﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻭﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ] ‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٣‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ >‪ <2‬ﻭ>‪ <3‬ﻭ>‪ <4‬ﻭ>‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪Default setting‬‬
‫[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Light/scene-based shots‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ( ﻭ]‪) [Ambience-based shots‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(٨٤‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Light/scene-based shots‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ( ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻔﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪5 4 3‬‬
‫‪k k k‬‬
‫‪k k k‬‬
‫‪k k k‬‬
‫‪k k k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k k‬‬
‫‪k k k‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<8‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ <2> :‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <3‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <4‬ﺃﻭ>‪.<5‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(7) <Q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Default‬‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Light/scene-based shots‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<2‬ﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪Default setting‬‬
‫[ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪Default setting‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Ambience-based shots‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Sunset‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Light/scene-based shots‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻔﻲ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻑء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺍﺑﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
٩٠
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪.(F/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <MF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<f‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ : X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ : 9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪ : Z‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻀﻲء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ" )ﺹ ‪.(٩٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z1: Beep‬ﺻﻔﻴﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻻ ﺗﺸﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪ (٩٤‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻈﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻭﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Servo‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻣّﺎ >‪ <9‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫‪) SEL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‪) SEL AF/‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪f/5.6 - f/3.2 :‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪f/2.8 - f/1.0 :‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ *.‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭ‪ 4L‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪.٢٫٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ )ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ،f/5.6‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ])‪[FlexiZoneAF (Single‬‬
‫) ‪) FlexiZoneAF‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(( ﻭ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ >‪ (<o‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٩‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫])‪) [FlexiZoneAF (Single‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) FlexiZoneAF‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ((‪) [u Live mode]/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٩٦‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <4 L‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﺤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪<o‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<R‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪: u‬‬
‫‪: i‬‬
‫‪:B‬‬
‫‪:M‬‬
‫‪: Q‬‬
‫‪:k‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﻋﻦ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣٫٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﻋﻦ >‪.<i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .١٠٠‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦٧‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <B‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<M‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ*‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑـ ‪ ١/٥٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ،4L‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻭ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻭ‪ ،٥٫٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ،٥٫٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻭ‪.5.6L‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<R‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ : k‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٦٦‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ >‪ <k‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣٦‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٩‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻘﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<R‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪.(F/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ .c ،b ،8a ،7a ،84 ،74 ،83 ،73 :JPEG‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) 61 ،41 ،1 :RAW‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Image quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Image quality‬‬
‫)ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<U‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "**‪) M‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ( **** ‪ "**** x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]***[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٩٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 73‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪1+73‬‬
‫‪61+74‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.73‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٩٩٩‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪7a‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪A2‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪A3‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪A4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫‪٦٫٠‬‬
‫‪١٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪(١٢٥٠) ٧٣‬‬
‫‪٣٫١‬‬
‫‪٢٣٨٠‬‬
‫‪(٢٣٨٠) ٢٣٨٠‬‬
‫‪٣٫٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣٠٠‬‬
‫‪(٢٣٠٠) ٢٣٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٫٧‬‬
‫‪٤٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪(٤٢٤٠) ٤٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢٫١‬‬
‫‪٣٤٥٠‬‬
‫‪(٣٤٥٠) ٣٤٥٠‬‬
‫‪١٫١‬‬
‫‪٦٣٧٠‬‬
‫‪(٦٣٧٠) ٦٣٧٠‬‬
‫‪١*b‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪١٫٢‬‬
‫‪٦١٣٠‬‬
‫‪(٦١٣٠) ٦١٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢*c‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٠٫٣‬‬
‫‪٢٣٠٧٠‬‬
‫‪(٢٣٠٧٠) ٢٣٠٧٠‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪A2‬‬
‫‪٢٣٫٥‬‬
‫‪٣٠٠‬‬
‫‪(١٧) ١٤‬‬
‫‪ ١١ 41 RAW‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪A3‬‬
‫‪١٨٫٥‬‬
‫‪٣٨٠‬‬
‫‪(١٠) ٨‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٠ 61‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪A4‬‬
‫‪١٣٫٠‬‬
‫‪٥٥٠‬‬
‫‪(١٧) ١٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪8a‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪A2‬‬
‫‪A2‬‬
‫‪٦٫٠+٢٣٫٥‬‬
‫‪٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪(٨) ٧‬‬
‫‪ ١١ 41‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪A3‬‬
‫‪A2‬‬
‫‪٦٫٠+١٨٫٥‬‬
‫‪٢٩٠‬‬
‫‪(٩) ٨‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٠ 61‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪A4‬‬
‫‪A2‬‬
‫‪٦٫٠+١٣٫٠‬‬
‫‪٣٨٠‬‬
‫‪(١٢) ١٠‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫*‪ b :١‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ c :٢‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ b‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪) 7‬ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ً UHS-I‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪.(.CR2‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪ 1 (RAW) :‬ﻭ‪ RAW) 41‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ‪61‬‬
‫)‪ RAW‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪) 7‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ( ﻭ‪) 8‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ‪) 3‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﻭ‪) 4‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ‪) 6‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪1 :‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 41‬ﺃﻭ ‪.61‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ]‪) [31: RAW image processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) (RAW‬ﺹ ‪ (٢٧٢‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) .JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪41‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 61‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ً RAW‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٢‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪."99‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ ،"99‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "buSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،UHS-I‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ً ١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ٢٠٦‬ﻭ‪.٢٠٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<i‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ISO 100 -‬‬
‫‪ 25600‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.١/٣‬‬
‫"‪ "A‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٠٨‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ("‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪ISO 100 - 400 ،L‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫‪ISO 400 - 1600‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء‬
‫‪H2 ،H1 ،ISO 1600 - 25600‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫* ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z4: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "L‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO 50‬ﻭ‪ ISO 100/125/160‬ﻭ"‪"H1‬‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO 51200‬ﻭ"‪) "H2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) (ISO 102400‬ﺹ ‪.(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ‪) H1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪ (ISO 51200‬ﻭ‪) H2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪ (102400‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Maximum: 25600‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻣﻊ ]‪ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،ISO 16000/20000/25600‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ISO 12800‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ 1. L (ISO 50‬ﺃﻭ )‪،H2 (ISO 102400)/2. H1 (ISO 51200‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1. ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ )‪ 2. H (ISO 25600‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [z3: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ )‪ ISO 50 (L‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)‪) ISO 102400 (H2‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ )‪ L‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H1‬ﺃﻭ ‪(H2‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٣١٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G/6/5/4/2/C/A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 12800‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 1600‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 25600‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪100 - 25600‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪400‬‬
‫‪١*ISO‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪400‬‬
‫‪٤*٣*٢*١*ISO‬‬
‫‪١*ISO‬‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Minimum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ( ﻭ]‪[Maximum‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٣‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ 6‬ﻭ‪.F‬‬
‫*‪ :٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،3‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<d‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ISO 400‬ﻭ‪.1600‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ )‪ L (ISO 50‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ،H1 (ISO 51200‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.H2 (ISO 102400‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪،(ISO‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪.ISO 100 - 25600‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ،ISO 100 - 12800‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫‪ ISO 200 - 25600‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Minimum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ( ﻭ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٦‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ>‪ <f‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <D‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪Picture‬‬
‫‪) [Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) D Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) P Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Q Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(١١٥‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪) R Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) S Neutral‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) U Faithful‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٢٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) V Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٣‬‬
‫‪) W User Def. 1-3‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪(٣-١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪Picture‬‬
‫‪) [Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :٧+‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪ V‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ( ﻭ]‪Toning‬‬
‫‪) [effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ( ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪None :N‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ(‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Yellow :Ye‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪Orange :Or‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪Red :R‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪Green :G‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪l‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﻼ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[S:Sepia‬‬
‫)ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[P:Purple‬‬
‫)ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪[User Def. 1‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[User Def. 3‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪Picture‬‬
‫‪) [Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ*(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ"‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.١١٧-١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *( ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(٥٦‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *( ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٥‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[White Balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ :K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪٧٠٠٠ - ٣٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٥٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬
‫‪٧٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﻖ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫‪٦٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻦ‬
‫‪٣٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٤٠٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٦‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫* ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlites‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Custom White Balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Custom‬‬
‫‪) [White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[White Balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[O‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪) ٪١٨‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪ .[O‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[White Balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WB Shift/Bkt.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪WB Shift/‬‬
‫‪) [Bkt.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪G1 ،A2 :‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪) "Shift‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB Shift/Bkt.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫)‪ (Mired‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :Mired) .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " "‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ " " )‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪) "Bracket‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB Shift/Bkt.‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .١ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪(B‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ )‪(M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪.(G‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٥‬‬
‫"ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ "‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺗُﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻤُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪[Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto Lighting Optimizer‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Auto‬‬
‫‪) [Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z4: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(١٥٨‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) HDR‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Disabled in M or B modes‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ >‪ <a‬ﻭ>‪.<F‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [High ISO speed NR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪High ISO‬‬
‫‪) [speed NR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪) [High‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ]‪) [Multi Shot Noise Reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫]‪) [z4: Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫]‪) [z4: HDR Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪[z4: Multiple exposure] ،‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Multi Shot‬‬
‫‪) [Noise Reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪8C.Fn II -5:‬‬
‫‪) [AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Multi Shot Noise Reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "buSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [z4: Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Multi Shot Noise Reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍ ًﺩﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Multi Shot Noise Reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﺌﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Long exp. noise reduction‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Long exp.‬‬
‫‪) [noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ "‪ "١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "BUSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Highlight‬‬
‫‪) [tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ ٪١٨‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (١٢٥‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Highlight tone priority‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪ISO 200 - 25600‬‬
‫)‪ ISO 200 - 12800‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺘﻤﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺿﺮﺑًﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻼ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Lens aberration correction‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Lens‬‬
‫‪) [aberration correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Peripheral illumin.‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ "ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٢‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Correction data available‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Chromatic aberration‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ "ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٢‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪) Utility‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Correction data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select folder‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select folder‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create folder‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create folder‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ "‪ "100CANON‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٩٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .(٩٩٩٩ - ٠٠٠١‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٣٧‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ ."DCIM‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ ."100ABC_D‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .٩٩٩‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫"‪ "100ABC_D‬ﻭ"‪ ،("100W_XYZ‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.IMG_0001.JPG :‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٩٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺴﻘﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Card-1‬‬
‫‪Card-2‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫‪XXX-0052‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪Card-1‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫‪XXX-0052‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،٠٠٠١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Card-1‬‬
‫‪Card-2‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫‪XXX-0001‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪Card-1‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫‪XXX-0001‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪.٠٠٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺲ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٩٩٩٩‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪ ."IMG‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑـ "_‪ ."MVI‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻫﻮ "‪ ".JPG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ "‪ ".CR2‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ "‪ ".MOV‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Copyright information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Copyright‬‬
‫‪) [information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enter author’s name‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Enter copyright details‬‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪<U> <V‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٣‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Display copyright info.‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]‪[Author‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ﻭ]‪) [Copyright‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete copyright information‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]‪) [Author‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ﻭ]‪) [Copyright‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٢‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﻤﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ sRGB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Color space‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ‪ Adobe RGB‬ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ(‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﻥ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ .ICC‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ICC‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٥‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪.(F/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪.(0‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* >‪ <d‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﻀﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ""‪ "30‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "4000‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ‪) ND‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ>‪<A‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ ،<d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء )ﺹ ‪.(٣٤٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ١/٣٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ "‪ "4000‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ "4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "125‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/١٢٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "0"5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ""‪ "15‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪(٥٫٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (f‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "4000‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ f‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،f‬ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ً‬
‫ﺿﻴﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ "ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <h‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]‪) [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ]‪) [Disabled in M or B modes‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪،(B‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <a‬ﻭ>‪) <F‬ﺹ ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣ ،٢٢‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<q‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ :q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ :r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ :e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٪٨٫٠‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٪٣٫٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪) q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪) w‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪) r‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ‪) e‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ ،<r‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١٣‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ .f/s/d‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑـ ]‪) [z3: Expo.comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )‪ (0‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪،LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AEB‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ("‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AEB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Expo.comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z3‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Expo.comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<U‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ >‪ <A‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ>‪<h‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <i‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪،<k‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ]‪Multi‬‬
‫‪) [Shot Noise Reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪N(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(0) .<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٩‬‬
‫‪*q‬‬
‫‪erw‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<F‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ‪) ٤٠٠‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z4: Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪) RS-80N3‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٧‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١٦٧‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ً‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪) [HDR Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪[HDR Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Adjust dyn range‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable HDR‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻻ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ .RAW+JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Continuous HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [1 shot only‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Every shot‬ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [1 shot only‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Every shot‬ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Disable‬‬
‫‪) [HDR‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Image Align‬ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺔ ‪) .ISO‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪.(ISO 100 - 25600‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Image Align‬ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٢٤٠‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٨١‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Image Align‬ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻭﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Auto Image Align‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﺌﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ LED‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫"‪) "buSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٧٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Multiple exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪Multiple‬‬
‫‪) [exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) Multiple exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Multi-expos ctrl‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻝ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[No. of exposures‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬
‫)ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺘﺎ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :١-‬ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :١٫٥-‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪٢-‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Additive‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [No. of exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Additive‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [No. of exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Continue Mult-exp‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [1 shot only‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Continuously‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [1 shot only‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Continuously‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<P‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﻭ‪ ٧‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Additive‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Additive‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٧‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ >‪ <x/w‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٣‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﻠﻴﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 61/41‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select image for multi. expo.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select image for multi. expo.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪) [No. of exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .١‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ]‪No. of‬‬
‫‪) [exposures‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻫﻮ ‪،٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ‪) ٢:٣‬ﺹ ‪ (١٨٨‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Deselect img‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<L‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ r‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؟‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ 41‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،61‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪61/41‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1+JPEG‬‬
‫‪1+JPEG‬‬
‫‪61+JPEG/41‬‬
‫‪1+JPEG‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Select image for multi. expo.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٦٧‬ﻭﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ؟‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(١٧٩‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ]‪) [A1: Aspect ratio‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[٣:٢‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ؟‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [52: Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻕ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-80N3‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٧‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ .(١٦٧‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٧‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻔﺼﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻛﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ‪TC-80N3‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ EOS‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪N3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٥٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-6‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦٫٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RC-1‬ﻭ‪.RC-5‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<R‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ً LED‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪) EOS‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻟﻴﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ .EX‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlit‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.١٧٧-١٧٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Macro Lites‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <A‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٩‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪z2: External‬‬
‫‪) [Speedlite control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪Flash‬‬
‫‪) [function settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <y‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ EOS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ‪ TL/ML/EG/E/EZ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ A-TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١/١٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١/٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [A2: Silent LV shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( )ﺹ ‪ .(١٩٠‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[External Speedlite control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [Speedlite control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(f‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/١٨٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٦٠-١/١٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١/١٨٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ١/١٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [1/180-1/60 sec. auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ١/٦٠-١/١٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪) [1/180-1/60 sec. auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٦٠-١/١٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [1/180-1/60 sec. auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٦٠-١/١٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ])‪[1/180 sec. (fixed‬‬
‫)‪ ١/١٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ((‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [E-TTL II flash metering‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ (E-TTL II‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Flash output level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[AUTO‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪First-curtain‬‬
‫‪) [synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Second-curtain synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [High-speed synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ"‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١/٢٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Second-curtain‬‬
‫‪) [synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) [Flash firing] :‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪) [E-TTL II meter.‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ (E-TTL II‬ﻭ]‪) [Flash exposure compensation‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫]‪) [Flash function settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪) .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Shutter‬‬
‫‪) [synchronization‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash C.Fn settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash C.Fn settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪z2: External‬‬
‫‪) [Speedlite control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear flash settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Clear all Speedlite C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪[Flash metering mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [TTL‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )‪ (P.Fn‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [Speedlite control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
١٧٨
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٥‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪.(١٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(73 JPEG‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١٦٧‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [A1: Live View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫]ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪) /‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٢٠٢-٢٠١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪) [52: Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ .(٥٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪52: Auto‬‬
‫‪) [power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٦٤ ،٢٦١‬‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫• ‪ - FlexiZone :d‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫• ‪ :c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ - FlexiZone) (AF‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[A1: Expo. simulation: Enable‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺹ ‪ .(٦٠‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ g‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ‪ ،g‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ g‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ )ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،A‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ*‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫*‪:١‬‬
‫*‪:٢‬‬
‫*‪:٣‬‬
‫*‪:٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫*‪٥*٤‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٥*٤‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪) "Non-Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﻭﻟﻴﻠﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫>← ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ<‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫*‪ :٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 2.8L‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 4L‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪٢٠١٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻭ*‪ :٥‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ *‪ ٤‬ﻭ*‪ ٥‬ﺳﺘﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ 2.8L‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ 4L‬ﻭﻣﺠﻬّﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛ ﱠﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻊ ]‪) [A1: Expo. simulation: Enable‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ(‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ>‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <8‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪S / q / i / R / f‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<R‬ﺃﻭ >‪،<i‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<q‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) w‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) r‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪ [A1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [A1‬ﻭ]‪ [A2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ١٨٧‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .١٩١‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ [A1‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[A2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ])‪) FlexiZoneAF) [FlexiZoneAF (Single‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(( )ﺹ ‪ (١٩٢‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٩٣‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٩٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [3x3 l‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[6x4 m‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [3x3+diag n‬ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ‪،(٣×٣+‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪M‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [٣:٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [٤:٣‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [١٦:٩‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[١:١‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.[١:١] [١٦:٩] [٤:٣] :‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‪.[٣:٢‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪٣:٢‬‬
‫‪٤:٣‬‬
‫‪١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪١:١‬‬
‫‪1/3‬‬
‫‪٥٤٧٢x٣٦٤٨‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٠٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٦٤x٣٦٤٨‬‬
‫)‪ ١٧٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٥٤٧٢x٣٠٧٢‬‬
‫)‪ ١٦٫٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٦٤٨x٣٦٤٨‬‬
‫)‪ ١٣٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪٤١٠٤x٢٧٣٦‬‬
‫)‪ ١١٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٦٤٨x٢٧٣٦‬‬
‫)‪ ١٠٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٤١٠٤x٢٣١٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٩٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٧٣٦x٢٧٣٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٧٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٣٦٤٨x٢٤٣٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٣٢٤٨x٢٤٣٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٣٦٤٨x٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫)‪ ٧٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٤٣٢x٢٤٣٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪61/a‬‬
‫‪٢٧٣٦x١٨٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٤٣٢x١٨٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٢٧٣٦x١٥٣٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٨٢٤x١٨٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*١٦٩٦x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٢٨٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠x٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٥٠,٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٦٤٠x٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣١٠,٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٧٢٠x٤٠٨‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٩٠,٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٣٠,٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،١:١‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )‪(g‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ‪e‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ )‪(E‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻓﻲ ]‪ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‪) .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪ [A2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪N‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،i‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٤٫١‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )‪(TS-E‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻀﻄﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪Silent LV‬‬
‫‪) [shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (٢‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪،(١٦٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 4L‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 3.5L‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،II‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[Mode 1‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.((AE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z4: Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪54: Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [54:Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [54:zFirmware ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ↔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪١٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ])‪FlexiZoneAF) [FlexiZoneAF (Single‬‬
‫)ﻓﺮﺩﻱ((‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،(١٩٣‬ﻭ]‪Quick‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[A1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪AF‬‬
‫‪) [method‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪d :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ > < ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٠‬‬
‫‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ( ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪c :‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<AF‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ >‪ <p‬ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <L‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )ﺹ ‪،(١٩٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <L‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <p‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺯﻣ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ .(AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪،LED‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ])‪) FlexiZoneAF) [FlexiZoneAF (Single‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(( ﺃﻭ ]‪[u Live mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،EF28mm f/2.8‬ﻭ‪ ،EF35mm f/2‬ﻭ‪ ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬ﻭ‪،EF50mm f/1.8 II‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro‬ﻭ)‪،EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus‬‬
‫‪ ،EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III‬ﻭ‪EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪f :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٩٢‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣّﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪) .(AF‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<MF‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<u‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪١٩٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء >‪ <s‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ >‪ <E‬ﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ >‪ <s‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ >‪<E‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺳﺘﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻜﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <s‬ﺃﻭ >‪ً <E‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <s‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [52: LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪.٢٠١١‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<k‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[53‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ >‪ ،<a‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٠-١٩٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪"o‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٣٣‬ﻭ‪.٢٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠١‬ﻭ‪.٢٠٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .<A‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ >‪ <s‬ﺃﻭ>‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<F‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<d‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٣٥٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Disabled in M or B modes‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (B‬ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<F‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <A‬ﺹ ‪ (١٥٣‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ]‪[Z1: Metering timer‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) .<S‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(<S‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(٢١٠‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(Exif‬‬
‫‪٢٠٥‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪.ISO 100 - 12800‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪.ISO 100 - 12800‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [z3: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [25600/H‬ﺹ ‪ ،(١٠٩‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟـ ‪ِ .(ISO 25600‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[25600‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z4: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٣٠‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪.ISO 200 - 12800‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [z3: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Auto‬‬
‫‪) [ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( )ﺹ ‪ (١١١ ،١١٠‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Minimum‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [L (50‬ﻭ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪[H1 (51200‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ])‪ ،[H2 (102400‬ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻫﻮ ‪) H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪.(ISO 25600‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ISO 50‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO 51200/102400‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ُ ) EX‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ ،(a‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫‪٢٠٦‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺳﻴﻼءﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪) "Non-portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٣‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٧‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺧﺎﺻًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<i‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫>‪.<9‬‬
‫• ‪ ١/٤٠٠٠ : 4 5 6‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٣٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١/٤٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٦٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‪7 8‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫"ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٤‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )‪ ،(A‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫‪ .ISO 100 - 12800‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [z3: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪،(ISO‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[25600/H‬ﻓﺴﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.H‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO 100 - 12800‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.١/٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [z3: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ ،[25600/H‬ﻓﺴﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[25600‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ِ .(ISO 25600‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [z4: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٣٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ً ISO 200 - 12800‬‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.((ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [z3: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Auto‬‬
‫‪) [ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Min. shutter spd.‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( )ﺹ ‪ (١١١ ،١١٠‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ،ISO 16000/20000/25600‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪.([H‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Minimum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [L (50‬ﻭ]‪) [Maximum‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪ [H1 (51200‬ﺃﻭ ])‪ [H2 (102400‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) [ISO speed range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪،(ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻫﻮ‬
‫‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻫﻮ ‪ .(ISO 25600) H‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ISO 50‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO 51200/102400‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١/١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٢١٠ ،٢٢‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٩‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ*‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪:L‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪:K‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫• ‪ - FlexiZone :d‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫• ‪ :c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ‪GPS‬‬
‫* ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺹ ‪.(٦٠‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٦١‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٠‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٣٣‬ﻭ‪.٢٣٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠١‬ﻭ‪.٢٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [Z1‬ﻭ]‪) [Z2‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٢٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.([A‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<p‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٠‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-6‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١٦٧‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<k‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<2‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ )ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ( ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻃﺮﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،٢٠١١‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢١٢‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪*ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [z1: Image quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [١٩٢٠x١٠٨٠‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[١٢٨٠x٧٢٠‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ .١٦:٩‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ]‪ ،[٦٤٠x٤٨٠‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻫﻲ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.ISO 100 - 12800 :‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻦ ‪.ISO 200‬‬
‫‪٢١٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.(AEB‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Sound‬‬
‫‪) [recording: Manual‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣُﺤﺴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<U‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪S / i / R / f‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪،<R‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪ .(AF‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪،(٢٠٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <i‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪٢١٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Z2: Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [53: Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ : [١٩٢٠x١٠٨٠] A‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ )‪ .(Full HD‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ : [١٢٨٠x٧٢٠] B‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ .(HD‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫‪[٦٤٠x٤٨٠] C‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪ :fps‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ : 8/6‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪) NTSC‬ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ : 7/5‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ‪) PAL‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪X IPB‬‬
‫‪-I) W ALL-I‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٢١٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،ALL-I‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،IPB‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ١١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٨٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪56 C‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٣٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺰﺍﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) .<0‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Full HD 1080‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ Full HD 1080‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪) ١٠٨٠‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪Z2: Sound‬‬
‫‪) [recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٦٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rec. level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ )‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ ١٢-) "12‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ "‪ ،"0‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫]‪[Wind filter‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ(‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫]‪[Attenuator‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪٢١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺳﻴﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Sound recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺎﺧﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟـ ]‪) [Sound recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻫﻲ ]‪) [On/Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) L‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻭ‪) R‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )‪ (L‬ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ )‪ (R‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٦/‬ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺮ‪ .‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[Z2: Time code‬‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬
‫]‪) [Rec run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Free run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ : [Manual input setting‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪Manual input‬‬
‫]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﻭ]‪Set to camera‬‬
‫‪) [time‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.00:00:00:00‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪ : [Set to camera time‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ" ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.00‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Rec time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Time code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻗﻀﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳُﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Free run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٦‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Movie rec count‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Rec time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Time code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Time code‬‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Movie play count‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻓﻲ ]‪Z2: Time‬‬
‫‪) [code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻟـ ]‪) [x3: Movie play count‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﺍﻷﻃﺮ" ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪ً ٥٩٫٩٤) 8‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻮ ‪ً ٢٩٫٩٧) 6‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴُﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺒﺎﻳ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ]‪) [Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻮ ‪ً ٢٣٫٩٧٦) 4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻫﻮ ]‪) [PAL‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،(5/7‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ )ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Drop frame‬‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ((‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[Z1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<k‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ [Z1‬ﻭ]‪ [Z2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.١٩٨-١٩٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ])‪) FlexiZoneAF) [FlexiZoneAF (Single‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ((‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ])‪) FlexiZoneAF) [FlexiZoneAF (Single‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٩٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.((AE‬‬
‫‪٢٢٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[Z2‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [3x3 l‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[6x4 m‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪+٣×٣) [3x3+diag n‬ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٢٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٢٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗُﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺄﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻔﻌﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٥٤ ،٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪x‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Video snapshot‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Z2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Video‬‬
‫‪) [snapshot‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢٢٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Album settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Album settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ"‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create a new album‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create a new album‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٢٢٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<V‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٢٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺄﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪J Save‬‬
‫‪) [as album‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺄﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺄﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٧‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪J Add‬‬
‫‪) [to album‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪W Save‬‬
‫‪) [as a new album‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺄﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Video snapshot‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٨‬ﻭ‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ J‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺄﻟﺒﻮﻡ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺄﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ J‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺄﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٨‬ﻭ‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ r‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(٨‬‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ]‪) [Playback video snapshot‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ*‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ*‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ' ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ''‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪:‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٥٣‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Skip backward/Skip forward‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Video snapshot‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫‪٢٢٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Add to existing album‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٢٦‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Add to existing album‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣًﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٢٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( )ﺹ ‪.(٢١٦‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Sound rec.‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Auto/Manual‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Auto/Manual‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢١٨‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٥٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(٢٥٧ ،٢٥٤‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‪ [L‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‪.[L‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢٣١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [W‬ﺣﻔﻆ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Overwrite‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ(‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :EOS Video Snapshot Task‬ﺻﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ImageBrowser EX‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء >‪ <s‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء >‪<E‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <s‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ >‪ <E‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <s‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻷﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺘﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <s‬ﺃﻭ >‪<E‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﻜﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ ،<1‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﺘﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺩﻭﻥ )ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ( ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ً‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺼﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ( ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٦٤ ،٢٦١‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫)ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ( ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻡ ‪.٢٠١١‬‬
‫‪٢٣٤‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٥‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺪﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ]‪) [33: Playback grid‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [3x3 l‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [6x4 m‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪+٣×٣) [3x3+diag n‬ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٧‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪<P‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <w‬ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <P‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<G‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<u‬‬
‫‪٢٣٨‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫* ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <C‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ]‪) [Background blur‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٩‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [33: Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [33: AF point disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻤﻦ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[33: Histogram disp‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻌﻪ‪،‬‬
‫‪٢٤١‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [6u‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<V‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<U‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫]‪ ،[6u‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[32‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Image jump‬‬
‫‪) [w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ :e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :g‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪ :h‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ :i‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ :j‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ :k‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٢٤٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Stills‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪٢٤٣‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫]‪ [6u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٤‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[33‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Magnificatn‬‬
‫)‪) [(apx‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ((‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<u‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ])‪) FlexiZoneAF) [FlexiZoneAF (Single‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٩٢‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪.[1x‬‬
‫‪٢٤٥‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate image‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪) [image‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٤٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.°٠ °٢٧٠ °٩٠ :‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [51: Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺹ ‪(٢٧٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪51: Auto‬‬
‫‪) [rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‪/n/m/l :‬‬
‫‪ .p/o‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rating‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[32‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Rating‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪٢٤٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [###‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [32: Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [32: Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٩٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٨‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :J] :‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :b،‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :9 ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ :R،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪) RAW‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :S ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ : ،‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ : ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ :e ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.[*Wi-Fi :k ،6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [53‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٧٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٧٧‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٩‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [51: Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [51: Auto rotate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [b Rotate image‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦٤ ،٢٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ )‪ (١٩٢٠x١٠٨٠ :Full HD‬ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ (١٢٨٠x٧٢٠ :HD‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI IN‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ،(HDMI‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٦٠-٢٥٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪EOS Video Snapshot‬‬
‫‪) Task‬ﺹ ‪ (٢٣٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٩٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺫﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،ImageBrowser EX‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .MOV‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٢‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <s1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ >‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻈ ًﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ .<U‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ*‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٦٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ' ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ''‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪:‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Movie play count: Rec time‬‬
‫)ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ((‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬ﺍﻷﻃﺮ‬
‫ِ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Movie play count:‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪) [Time code‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ((‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٥٣‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٦٤ ،٢٦١‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[X‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪) [U‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[V‬‬
‫)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <U‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪) <5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء )ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[W‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Overwrite‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ(‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫[(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[32‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Slide show‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [All images/Movies/Stills‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) jAll images] :‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) kMovies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪) zStills/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ([‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date/Folder/Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪[9Rating/nFolder/iDate] :‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ >‪ ،<zH‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫]‪) [Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‬
‫‪٢٥٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪ j‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Display time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪٢٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Set up‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Display time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Repeat‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ( )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Transition effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ( )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ]‪[Background music‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٦٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫]‪) [Repeat‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫]‪[Transition effect‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫]‪[Background music‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺪء(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Loading image...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،(...‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٦١‬‬
‫‪٢٥٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Background music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Background music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )‪ (HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <dHDMI MINI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<D‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥٣‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪ <D‬ﻭ>‪.<q‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪HDMI CEC‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ *HDMI CEC‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ (HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[33‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Ctrl over‬‬
‫‪) [HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،(HDMI‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢٦٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Return‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ( ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ً HDMI CEC‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،HDMI CEC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [33: Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪.<q‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥٣‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[53: Video system‬‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٤‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Protect‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<K‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪٢٦٥‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[All images on card‬‬
‫)ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ]‪x1:‬‬
‫‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Unprotect all‬‬
‫‪) [images in folder‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Unprotect all images on card‬‬
‫)ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٥٣‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٦٨‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪٢٦٦‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٦٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Erase‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢٦٧‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select and erase images‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select and erase images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪31:‬‬
‫‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٣‬‬
‫‪٢٦٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.(LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[52‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LCD brightness‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،(LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<U‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪zD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪D‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٠‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) JPEG‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪.(F/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫>‪.<C‬‬
‫‪٢٧١‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ً RAW‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 41‬ﻭ‪ 61‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital‬‬
‫‪) Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٢‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [RAW image processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪RAW image‬‬
‫‪) [processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪،(RAW‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٧٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫‪) RAW‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٧٦-٢٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ >‪ <V‬ﻭ>‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ"‬
‫ﻭ"ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ" ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [W‬ﺣﻔﻆ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Image quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻓﻲ ]‪) [RAW image processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .(RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ،<9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)]‪ ([١:١] [١٦:٩] [٤:٣‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫‪٢٧٣‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ .١/٣‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[P‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ .RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]****‪ ،[***M ****x‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .٣:٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٧٨‬‬
‫‪٢٧٤‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ً .Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺻﻔﺎءً‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Digital Photo Professional‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Distortion correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٤٠‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٨١‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٥‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٢‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪٢٧٦‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG 3/4/a/b‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG c‬ﻭ‪.RAW‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Resize‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[32‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Resize‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪٢٧٧‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]****‪ ،[***M ****x‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .٣:٢‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪٣:٢‬‬
‫‪٤:٣‬‬
‫‪١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪١:١‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٣٦٤٨×٢٤٣٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٣٢٤٨×٢٤٣٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٣٦٤٨×٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫)‪ ٧٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٤٣٢×٢٤٣٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪٢٧٣٦×١٨٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٤٣٢×١٨٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٢٧٣٦×١٥٣٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٨٢٤×١٨٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*١٦٩٦×١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×١٠٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٢٨٠×١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠×٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٥٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٦٤٠×٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣١٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٧٢٠×٤٠٨‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٩٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٠×٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٣٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٨‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﻨﻔﺾ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٩٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٩‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺮﻋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﻨﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﻣ ً‬
‫ُﻌﻄﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٢‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Dust Delete‬‬
‫‪) [Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪ ٠٫٧‬ﻗﺪﻡ ‪ ١٫٠ -‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﻜﻼ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪.٢٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٢‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٩٥‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "CLn‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA/LR6‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫• ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء ً‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻛﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٢٨٤‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٨٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫)‪ DPS‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (IP‬ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺹ ‪(٢٩٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٢٩٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪<C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫‪٦w‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Bubble Jet Direct‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩٤‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <F‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <G‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <8‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪.(HDR‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[53‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ( ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٧‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ( )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫* ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٨٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪c‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ*‪ ١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣُﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٢*Letter‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪c‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ • ]‪ ٢٠) [20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪p‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪) "(DPOF‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٩٥‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ "ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ" )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ً‬
‫‪٢٨٩‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ E‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<e‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ >‪ ،<z‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺯﻫﻮًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ E‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ"‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫"‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٩٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ H1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،H2 ISO‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٠‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <R‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Print‬‬
‫)ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٩٣‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [54: Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٥٦‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩١‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،٢٩٠‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <e‬ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<U‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ )‪ (١٢٧-٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪(٢٥٥-١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻳﻦ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ .<9‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٢‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <O‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٣‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Continue‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٤‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﻭ]‪[Date‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪٢٩٥‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪) PictBridge‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٨٦‬‬
‫‪٢٩٦‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <V‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ >‪<X‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪n‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Mark all in folder‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Clear all in‬‬
‫‪) [folder‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Mark all on card‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Clear all on card‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪ "n‬ﺃﻭ "ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٧‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[31‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ( )ﺹ ‪.(٢٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٩٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺫﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Resume‬ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٩٤‬‬
‫‪٢٩٨‬‬
‫‪ p‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Photobook Set-up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[x1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Photobook‬‬
‫‪) [Set-up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪٢٩٩‬‬
‫‪ p‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [x1: Photobook Set-up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[All images on card‬‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear all in folder‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Clear all on card‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﻭ>‪<x‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻤﻨﻄ‬
‫ﺍﻟ‬
‫‪٣٠١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،C.Fn I-III‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[8‬‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪) [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪ ((C.Fn‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪8C.Fn III -2:‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn III -2) [Focusing Screen‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭ]‪8C.Fn III -5: Custom‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn III -5) [Controls‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ :C.Fn I‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٠٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٠٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٠٦‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪a‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn II‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٠٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٠٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٠٩‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣١٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪*f‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪*f‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪*f‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪*f‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪*f‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣١١‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪*f‬‬
‫‪*f‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ ،LED‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ d‬ﻭ‪.c‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn III‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Tv/Av‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣١١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣١٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ! ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪ (LV‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn I‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪C.Fn I -1‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ ١/٣ :٠‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ ١/٢ :١‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪C.Fn I -2‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ ١/٣ :٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪C.Fn I -3‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ً (AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪C.Fn I -4‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪+s-s٠: ٠‬‬
‫‪+s٠s- :١‬‬
‫‪-s٠s+ :٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫‪C.Fn I -5‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٧‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Bracketing sequence: 0‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣ :٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﻟﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥ :٢‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٧ :٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪(٠‬‬
‫‪١-‬‬
‫‪ :١‬ﻟﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪(٠‬‬
‫‪١±‬‬
‫‪ ٣ :٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١+‬‬
‫‪ ٥ :٢‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪(٠‬‬
‫‪٢-‬‬
‫‪١-‬‬
‫‪١+‬‬
‫‪٢+‬‬
‫‪ ٧ :٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪(٠‬‬
‫‪٣-‬‬
‫‪٢-‬‬
‫‪١-‬‬
‫‪١+‬‬
‫‪٢+‬‬
‫‪٣+‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ +‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺹ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪C.Fn I -6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ )‪ (s‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ .(f‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (d‬ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ (s‬ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ .(f‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [z3: ISO speed settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Min. shutter sped.‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪ .(١١٠‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto ISO range‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Shutter speed/Aperture‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[ISO speed‬‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn II‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪C.Fn II -1‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ AI Servo‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[0‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) Locked on‬ﻣُﻘﻔﻞ(‪) Locked on / ٢- :‬ﻣُﻘﻔﻞ(‪[١- :‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٢-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.١-‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) Responsive‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ(‪) [١+:Responsive / ٢+ :‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٢+‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.١+‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ]‪) [Tracking sensitivity‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ( ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ]‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) [tracking sensitivity‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (AI Servo‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS-1D‬‬
‫‪ Mark III/IV‬ﻭ‪ EOS-1Ds Mark III‬ﻭ‪.EOS 7D‬‬
‫‪٣٠٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪C.Fn II -2‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[0‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[+2/+1‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﻉ‪/‬ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٢+‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.١+‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪C.Fn II -3‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫]‪) [Equal priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Release priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ( ) (‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Focus priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ) (‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪C.Fn II -4‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫]‪) [Equal priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Shooting speed priority‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( )‬
‫(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Focus priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ) (‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪C.Fn II -5‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.EOS‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻮﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ ،LED‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ]‪[AF-assist beam firing‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪C.Fn II -6‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪Stop‬‬
‫‪) [focus search‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪C.Fn II -7‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ .١‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ )‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(٣‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪C.Fn II -8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻀﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻋﺠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪C.Fn II -9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣١٤‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn III‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ C.Fn III -1‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Tv/Av‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ >‪ ،<a‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ .<5‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <a‬ﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪ C.Fn III -2‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Eg-A II :٠‬‬
‫‪Eg-D :١‬‬
‫‪Eg-S :٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ : Eg-A II‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Eg-D‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Eg-S‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑـ ‪ .Eg-A II‬ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪ Eg-A‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Eg-S‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/2.8‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ ،f/2.8‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺘﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪.Eg-A II‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪8: Clear all Custom Func.‬‬
‫)‪) [(C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪.((C.Fn‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻲ ‪ ،Eg-A II‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ C.Fn III -2-0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪ C.Fn III -3‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻨﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ <5‬ﻭ>‪ <9‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ >‪ <R‬ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <L‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ً .LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٨‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <R‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ C.Fn III -4‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ! ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <h‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﻠﺤﻖ >‪ ،<X‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪V‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(١١٣‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٢٣‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (٥٠) L‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (٥١٢٠٠) H1‬ﺃﻭ ‪) (١٠٢٤٠٠) H2‬ﺹ ‪ ،(١٠٧‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Spot metering‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(١٥٠‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C.Fn III -5‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺻﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٢٠‬‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ"‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣١٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪:C.Fn II) [C.Fn II: Autofocus‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪C.Fn II:‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn II) [Autofocus‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [AF Microadjustment]:[9‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [AF Microadjustment]:[9‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ :١) [1: All by same amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ :١) [1: All by same amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[1: All by same amount‬‬
‫)‪ :١‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠±‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ "‪ " :-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ "‪ " :+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ :١) [1: All by same amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣٦‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪. " :+‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪." :-‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ :١) [1: All by same amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١٥‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪ (W‬ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪.(T‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ :٢) [2: Adjust by lens‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ :٢) [2: Adjust by lens‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[2: Adjust by lens‬‬
‫)‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫"‪ ."0000000000‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ‬
‫" * " ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " * " ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ُﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ " * "‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ :٢) [2: Adjust by lens‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١٧‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪ .(T‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠±‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ "‪ " :-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ "‪ " :+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪.(T‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ :٢) [2: Adjust by lens‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣٦‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪." :+‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪." :-‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١٨‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [ Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ :١) [1: All by same amount‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ( ﻭ]‪ :٢) [2: Adjust by lens‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٠٢‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ :٠) [0: Disable‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.73‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺤﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ - FlexiZone‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪) u‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١٩‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺻﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[C.Fn III: Operation/Others‬‬
‫)‪ :C.Fn III‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪C.Fn III:‬‬
‫‪ :C.Fn III) [Operation/Others‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom Controls]:[5‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom Controls]:[5‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٣٢٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯ ًﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺯﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪:C.Fn III -5) [8C.Fn III -5: Custom Controls‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪8: Clear all Custom Func.‬‬
‫)‪) [(C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪.((C.Fn‬‬
‫‪٣٢١‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪) ONE SHOT‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪z AI‬‬
‫‪SERVO‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪٣٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪٣٢٤‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪) (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ(‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪) (AE‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪٣٢٥‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪،‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣٢٦‬‬
‫‪٣٢٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٣٢٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٢٢‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AF‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢٣‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) ONE SHOT :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪AI SERVO z‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .AI Servo‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Al Servo‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Al Servo‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢٤‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ ((AE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪) (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ ((AE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪) (AE‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ .((AE‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<a‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ >‪ ،<a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ >‪ ،<a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪٣٢٥‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (١٠٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (١١٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٤٧‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪My Menu‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register to My Menu‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register to My Menu‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪،٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪) [Delete item/items] .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ(‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪) [Delete all items‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ً [9‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢٧‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ >‪ <w‬ﻭ>‪ <x‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Custom shooting mode‬‬
‫)‪) [(C1, C2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫)‪ C1‬ﻭ‪.((C2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Custom‬‬
‫)‪) [shooting mode (C1, C2‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )‪ C1‬ﻭ‪ ،((C2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣٠ ،٣٢٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪ *C‬ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<x‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto update set.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٢٩‬ﻭ‪.٣٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٣٢٨‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ +‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪ [z1‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪ [z2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫]‪ [z3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ،(AEB‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪،ISO‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫]‪ [z4‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫]‪ [A1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫]‪ [A2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫]‪ [Z1‬ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫]‪ [Z2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫]‪ [x2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪6‬‬
‫]‪ [x3‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫]‪ [51‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫]‪ [52‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪٣٢٩‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫]‪ :C.Fn I) [C.Fn I: Exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪ :C.Fn II) [C.Fn II: Autofocus‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫]‪ :C.Fn III) [C.Fn III: Operation/Others‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Tv/Av‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<x‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪54: Clear all camera‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻭ])‪[8: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪.((C.Fn‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<x‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ >‪ <w‬ﻭ>‪<x‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٤ ،٣٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Certification Logo Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺒﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]‪) [Displays camera settings‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻭ]‪) [Electronic level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (٦٠‬ﻭ]‪Displays shooting‬‬
‫‪) [functions‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( )ﺹ ‪.(٣٣٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[53‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ]‪z button‬‬
‫‪) [display options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ (z‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ >‪ <X‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Displays camera settings‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Electronic level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ w‬ﻭ‪x‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٤٠‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢٤ ،١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٢‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣١٤‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢٦‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٣ ،٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٣٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪/(HDR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳ ّ‬
‫ُﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <R‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <i‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <q‬ﺃﻭ >‪،<S‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "‪) "Shooting function settings display‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[54‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Battery‬‬
‫‪) [info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٥‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ .Canon‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،LP-E6‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .BG-E13‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA/LR6‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪use this‬‬
‫?‪) [battery‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ؟(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<M‬ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫‪ BG-E13‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪.ACK-E6‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٣٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫‪0300‬‬
‫‪7c40‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ × ‪ ٠٫٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٢‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E13‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻷﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺰﻋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻖ‬
‫‪٣٣٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣ ّ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ُﺮﻛﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete info.‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٣٥‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Delete info.‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٣٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﻨّﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Eye-Fi settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[51‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Eye-Fi settings‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺹ ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،(Eye-Fi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Eye-Fi trans.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻘﻞ ‪ (Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ‪.(I‬‬
‫‪٣٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Connection info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Access point SSID:‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ )‪ (SSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.(:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪Access‬‬
‫‪) [point SSID:‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ (SSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.(:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Eye-Fi card‬ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <H‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ O‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٣٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫‪) H‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) H‬ﻭﺍﻣﺾ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) H‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ H(d‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [53: Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ " "‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Eye-Fi trans.‬ﻧﻘﻞ ‪ (Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪[Eye-Fi settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ >‪ <H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٣٤١‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻌﻄﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪6 5 4 3 2‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪k k k k k k k‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪١*k ١*k‬‬
‫‪o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k‬‬
‫‪o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k o‬‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o o o‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣ